Page 1 KG290 ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫- ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬...
Page 2 ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﺑﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‬ (‫)ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ 123 ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ (‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬ 13 KG290 ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ‬ 29 ‫ﺳﺮﺩ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬...
Page 3 ‫ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ MP3 ‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺍﻻﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﺎﺩﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬FM GPRS ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬...
Page 4 ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺤﺚ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﻮﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺳﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬...
Page 5 ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ USB ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ...
Page 6 ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ KG290 ‫ﻧﻬﻨﺌﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻷﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﻭﺻﻐﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺼﻤﻢ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﺻﻠﺖ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬ .‫ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ .‫ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺑﻜﻞ‬...
Page 7 ‫ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻚ‬ !‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ. ﻳﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫• ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺗﺸﺘﺮﻁ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻋﻴﺔ. ﻳﻤﺪﻙ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ،‫ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺫﻟﻚ. ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﻘﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺛﺮ...
Page 8 (SAR) ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻋﻲ‬ ◄ ‫ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﺠﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ‬SAR KG290 ‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻣﻮﺩﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻝ‬ ‫( ﻳﺒﻠﻎ‬ICNIPR) ‫ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻳﻮﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ (10) ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻟﻪ 2 ﻭﺍﺕ/ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺟﺮﺍﻡ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻋﺸﺮﺓ‬...
Page 9 ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺻﻴﺎﻧﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ‬ ◄ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻛﺴﻮﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻐﻄﺎء ﻣﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻐﻄﺎء ﻣﺼﻨﻮﻉ‬ !‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ .‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺳﻄﺢ‬ ◄ .‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﺩﻳﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ...
Page 10 ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‬ .‫ﺍﻋﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻧﺘﺒﺎﻫﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬ ◄ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻃﻘﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ )ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ◄ ‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻟﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ‬ . ً ‫ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ(، ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮﺍ‬ .‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﺵ( ﻣﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ◄...
Page 11 ‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﻻﺫﻧﻚ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻨﻘﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ‬ ◄ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻔﺠﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻀﺮ ّ ﺭ ﻻﺫﻧﻚ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻝ...
Page 12 .‫ﺑﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬ LG ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺷﺎﺣﻦ‬ ◄ ‫ﺗﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﻓﻖ‬ ‫ ﻟﻴﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬LG ‫ﻓﻘﻂ. ﻟﻘﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ‬ ◄ .‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼ ﻨ ّ ﻌﺔ‬ .‫ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ .‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺼﺮ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺗﻬﺎ‬...
Page 13 KG290 ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﺧﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ :(‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ )ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ‬ ◄ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ :(‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ )ﻣﻐﻠﻖ‬ ◄ ‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﻗﺼﻴﺮ - ﺗﻀﻲء ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ .LCD ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬...
Page 14 KG290 ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ: ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬ ◄ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ◄ ‫ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ: ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺁﺧﺮ‬ ◄ ‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ: ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻲ‬ ◄ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ ﻭ‬...
Page 15 ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‬ ◄ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ◄ .‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻻﺕ‬ .‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‬ :‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‬ ◄ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ: ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ...
Page 16 KG290 ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ. ﻭﻫﻲ‬ .‫ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ * .‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬...
Page 17 ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ .‫* ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﺩﺛﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ،‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻃﺘﻴﻦ‬ .‫ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺭﺩﻳﺌ ً ﺎ. ﻳ ُﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ .‫ﺑﺎﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬...
Page 18 ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬ SIM ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ .‫1. ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻭﺃﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻬﺎ. ﺍﻗﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺭﺃﺳﺎ ً ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻘﺐ، ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ‬ .‫ﻣﻮﺿﺢ، ﺛﻢ ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺄﺻﺒﻌﻴﻚ ﻭﺃﺧﺮﺟﻬﺎ‬ SIM ‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ SIM ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ◄...
Page 19 ‫2. ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺒﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺒﻴﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ. ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ‬ .‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ‬...
Page 20 ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬ .‫3. ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. )ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺑﻘﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ، ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺑﻔﻘﺪ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ.( ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺰﺍﻟﻴﺞ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ .‫ﺛﻢ ﺧﺮ ﻟﺒﻄﺎ ﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻊ ﻟﺒﻄﺎ ﻳﺔ‬...
Page 21 ‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫3. ﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ. ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ، ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻭﻻ ً ﻣﻦ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﻌﺒﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ .‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫4. ﺳﺘﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬ .‫ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ !‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬...
Page 22 ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬ !‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‬ ‫• ﺍ ﻧﺰﻉ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ،‫ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺴﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻ ّ ﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﻋﺪﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ‬ .‫ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ‬ .‫ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﺄﺳﻨﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ...
Page 23 ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ .‫ﺭﻗﻤﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬ ‫1. ﺍ ﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ .‫1. ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ .‫ﺟﻬﺎﺕ...
Page 24 ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ )ﺗﻠﻘﻲ( ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ، ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺭﻧﻴ ﻨ ً ﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺘﻚ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ .‫ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎء‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻣﺾ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ،‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ، ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ...
Page 25 ‫ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬ T9 ‫ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﻧﻲ، ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺍﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻗﻮﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ‬ .‫( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ) ‫ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ. ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ...
Page 26 ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ T9 ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ (‫ﻭﺿﻊ 321 )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬ ‫ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﻑ‬T9 ‫ﻳ ُﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﺌﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻳﺮﺍﺩ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺘﻪ. ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻄﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ...
Page 27 (‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﺑﺖ )ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ‬ ‫ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ‬T9 ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ‬ ◄ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ .‫ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻫﻮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬ ‫1. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬...
Page 28 ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ 123 ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮﺓ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ً ﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ (‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬ .1 ! ، : ‫؛‬ 2 ‫ﺏ ﺕ ﺓ ﺙ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻧﺺ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ )ﺭﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ، ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ‬ 3 ‫ﺍ...
Page 29 ‫ﺳﺮﺩ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ. ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ .‫ﻟﻠﺬﻫﺎﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺃﻳﻀ ً ﺎ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺓ ً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ...
Page 30 ‫ﺳﺮﺩ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫8. ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫6. ﺍﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫4. ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫8.1 ﺑﺤﺚ‬ ‫6.1 ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ MP3 ‫4.1 ﻣﺸﻐﻞ‬ ‫8.2 ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫6.2 ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫4.2 ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫8.3 ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫6.3 ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫4.3 ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫8.4 ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ‬ ‫6.4 ﺍﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬FM 4.4 ‫8.5 ﻧﺴﺦ...
Page 31 ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ‬ .‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ: ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ◄ 1.1 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ: ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‬ ◄ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺪء ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻘﺪﻣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ ﺃﻭ‬URL ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ: ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬ .‫ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬ ◄ .‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ...
Page 32 ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻠﻴﻦ، ﻭﻗﺪ‬ 4.1 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. ﺗﺴﺘﺤﻴﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ‬ .‫ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬ .‫ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ :‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‬ .‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ: ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ◄...
Page 33 ‫ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ (5.6.1 ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ (2.6.1 ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ، ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ/ﺍﻟﺠﺬﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ‬ .‫ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﻫﻨﺎ‬WTLS/TSL ‫ﺍﻻﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﻞ‬ .(‫)ﻣﻠﺊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ، ﺍﺣﺘﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ .‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ‬ (3.6.1 ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ (6.6.1 ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬...
Page 34 ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ‬ ‫ﺟﺎﻓﺎ ﺍﺳﻜﺮﻳﺒﺖ‬ (7.6.1 ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻓﺎ ﺳﻜﺮﻳﺒﺖ‬ .‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ (8.6.1 ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ .(‫)ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ 7.1 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ .WAP ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ‬...
Page 35 ‫ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﺎﺩﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ‬ 3.2 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺳﺠﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ‬ ‫ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻓﻲ‬ .‫...
Page 36 ‫ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ: ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ◄ .‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ: ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬ ◄ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻬﺎ ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻣﻨﺬ‬ .‫ﺁﺧﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ 6.2 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺗﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺻﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ...
Page 37 ‫ﺗﺴﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺬﻛﻴﺮﻙ ﺑﻤﻬﺎﻣﻚ‬ 1.3 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺗﻚ. ﺳﻴﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺪﻕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺔ. ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ .‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ‬ ‫1. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ...
Page 38 ‫ﺗﺴﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ 4.3 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ .‫ﻋﺮﺽ: ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ‬ ◄ ‫1. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‬ .[‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫2. ﺇ ﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ: ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ‬ ◄...
Page 39 ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ: ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﻤﻞ‬ ‫1. ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ◄ .[‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ، ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺎﺕ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫2. ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫. ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺤﻴﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺭﻣﺰ ”-“ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤ ﻮ ّ ﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ...
Page 40 ‫ﺗﺴﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬ SIM ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻝ‬ 9.3 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ .‫ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬SIM ‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ 0.3 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺳﻮﺍء ﺍﻛﺎﻥ : ﻣﻴﻼﺩﻱ، ﻫﺠﺮﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻭ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ‬...
Page 41 ‫ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ MP3 ‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ (2.3.1.4 ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ 1.4 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ”ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ‬ .“‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ“, ”ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ“, ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺍﻻﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ (1.1.4 ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬ .‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬ (3.3.1.4 ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ...
Page 42 ‫ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫• ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ 2.4 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ . ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‬ ‫- ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ، ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ، ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻸﺷﺨﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ. ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ، ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ .‫ﺣﺮﻛﺔ‬...
Page 43 ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫[: ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ] ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‬ ◄ 3.4 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬ .“‫1. ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ”ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ .‫ﻭﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻭﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﺟ ﺪ ً ﺍ‬ ‫2. ﺇﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ‬ ‫[: ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ]‫ﻣﻮﻗﺖ...
Page 44 ‫ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬FM ‫[: ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ] ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ 4.4 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ◄ MMS ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺒﺮ‬ .“‫ﺃﻭ ”ﻋﺎﻡ‬ ‫[: ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ] ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬ ◄ ‫821 ﻭ‬x96 ‫ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻵﺗﻴﺘﻴﻦ‬ 176x144 ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬...
Page 45 ‫ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ، ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ 5.4 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ :‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ 01 ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ‬ .‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ: ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬ ◄ ‫ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ. ﺑﻮﺍﻗﻊ 06 ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺣﺪ ﺍﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺤﺺ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ: ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬ .‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ◄ .‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ...
Page 46 ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ 1.5 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ .‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ: ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ‬ ◄ ‫ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺏ‬ .‫1. ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻢ‬ MMS ‫ )ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮﺓ( ﻭ‬SMS ‫)ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ( ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫2. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ .‫ﻣﻦ...
Page 47 ‫- ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ: ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ EMS ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ◄ .‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‬ ‫5 ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺎﺣ ً ﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫- ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ: ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻮﻧﺔ ﻭﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻭﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ، ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬...
Page 48 ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ: ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ◄ .‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺟﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻫﻮ‬ .‫003 ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ: ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ◄ .‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﻮﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻘﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ: ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ◄...
Page 49 .‫ﻋﺮﺽ: ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ‬ ◄ 2.5 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ .‫ﺣﺬﻑ: ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ◄ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ. ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ‬ .‫ﺭﺩ: ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻞ‬ ،‫ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ. ﻭﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ‬ ◄ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺎﺩﺓ...
Page 50 ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﻮﺩﺍﺕ‬ 4.5 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ 3.5 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺷﻚ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ، ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ .‫ﺃﻥ ﺗﺮﺳﻠﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎ ً . ﺗﻨﻘﻞ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ...
Page 51 ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺳﻠﺔ‬ 7.5 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ 5.5 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ (‫) ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﺴﺒﻘ ً ﺎ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ .‫ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﺳﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻘﺪﻡ...
Page 52 ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ (1.7.5 ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ 8.5 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫1. ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻚ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫“ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ” ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ، ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ (1.8.5 ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ :‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺳﺘﺔ ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ‬ .‫•...
Page 53 ،‫ﺇ ﺩﺭﺍﺝ: ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺭﻣﺰ، ﻭﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ‬ ◄ ◄ ،‫ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ، ﻭﺻﻮﺕ، ﻭﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬ ‫- ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ: ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻭﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﻧﺺ، ﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ، ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬ SMS ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﺒﺮ‬ .‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ‬ ‫- ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ: ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ: ﻳﺴﻤﺢ...
Page 54 ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ: ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ◄ 9.5 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ، ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬ .‫ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬SMS ‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ‬ (1.9.5 ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ : ‫ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ◄ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ (2.9.5 ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﺺ ﻭﺻﻮﺕ ﻭﻓﺎﻛﺲ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ: ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ...
Page 55 ‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ: ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬ ◄ (3.9.5 ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻢ ﻗﺪ ﻗﺮﺃ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺘﻚ. ﺗﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ‬ .‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ. ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ: ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ، ﻓﺴﺘﺘﺴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺗﻲ...
Page 56 ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ◄ ‫- ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ: ﺳﻴﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻚ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬ .‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫- ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ: ﻟﻦ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻚ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬ .‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ‬ ◄ ‫- ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ. ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ، ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ .‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ...
Page 57 ‫ﺍﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻒ‬ ◄ 1.6 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ .‫- ﺇ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ: ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ\ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬JPG ‫ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ .‫ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ .‫ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ ﻋﻨﺪ‬JPG ‫ﻋﺮﺽ: ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻒ‬ ◄ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ”ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ“ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ * : / \ ‫ﻻ...
Page 58 ‫ﺍﺷﻲ ﺍﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬ !‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ 2.6 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻧﻘﻞ‬ AAC‫ ﻭ‬MP4‫ ﻭ‬MP3 ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ، ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺧﻄﻴﺮ‬ ‫ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻄﻲ/ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬M4A‫ﻭ‬ .‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ: ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ .‫- ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ: ﻟﻌﺮﺽ...
Page 59 ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ: ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ !‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ◄ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ”ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ“ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻧﻘﻞ‬ .‫”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ، ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺧﻄﻴﺮ‬ .‫ﺣﺬﻑ: ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ .‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ◄ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ...
Page 60 ‫ﺍﺷﻴﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺮﻯ‬ 5.6 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ 4.6 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ /‫ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ، ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺟﺎﻓﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟ ﻤ ُ ﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ .‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ، ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬...
Page 61 ‫ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺋﻊ‬LG ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ ‫ ﻛﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺫﻱ‬KG290 ‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ‬ ،‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ‬ ◄ .‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ“ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ،USB ‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺳﻌﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‬...
Page 62 ‫ﺍﻻﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺨﺼﻴﺼﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻼﺋﻢ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺎﺕ‬ .‫ﻭﻟﺘﻼﺋﻢ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ‬ : ً ‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻡ, ﺻﺎﻣﺖ, ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻓﻘﻂ, ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ, ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‬ .‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ‬...
Page 63 ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ: ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺤﺚ‬ ◄ 1.8 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫1. ﺣ ﺪ ّ ﺩ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ .‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻝ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺃﻭ‬ .[‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬ .‫ﺣﺬﻑ: ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻻﺕ‬ ◄...
Page 64 ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ 3.8 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ 2.8 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء. ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ .‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻞ...
Page 65 ‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ‬ 5.8 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ 4.8 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ ﺇﻟﻰ‬SIM ‫ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺄﻋﻀﺎء ﻣﺤﺪﺩﻳﻦ ﻟﻜﻞ‬ .‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ. ﺛﻤﺔ 7 ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ .‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻬﺎ‬ ‫ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ: ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻻﺕ‬SIM ◄ .‫...
Page 66 ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ 8.8 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ 7.8 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫]ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء[ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫1. ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬ ◄ .‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌ ﻴ ّﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻮﻓ ّ ﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﺸ ﻐ ّ ﻞ‬ .[‫]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫2. ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ، ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ...
Page 67 ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ 2.9 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ 1.9 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ، ﺳﻴﺆﺛﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ً ﻋﻠﻰ‬ .‫ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ .‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ (1.1.9 ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ .‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ 3.9 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬...
Page 68 ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺣﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬ (7.3.9 ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ (3.3.9 ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ :‫ ﻋﻠﻰ‬LCD ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ، ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ .‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‬ %40 ‫%001 ﻭ 08% ﻭ 06% ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ (8.3.9 ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻤﻦ...
Page 69 ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻟﻜﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯﻳﻦ( ﻛﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻗﺘﺮﻥ ﺑﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺭﻣ ﺰ ٌ ﺣ ﺪ ّ ﺩﺗﻪ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ً ﺟﻬﺔ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ‬ ‫. ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺖ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬KG290 ً ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ. ﻳﺮﺟﻰ‬ .‫ﻣﻘﺘﺮﻧﺔ، ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬...
Page 70 ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ، ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺤﺚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ً ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﻳﺤﺪﺩﻫﺎ. ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ‬ .‫- ﺍﺳﻤﻲ: ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ .LG KG290 ‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻫﻮ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“، ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ”ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫- ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻧﻲ: ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬...
Page 71 USB ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﻀﻞ‬ ◄ (3.4.9 ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻴﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﻭﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ، ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء، ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ...
Page 72 ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﻛﺲ: ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ◄ 5.9 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻪ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺎﻛﺲ‬ .‫ﺑﻼ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ (1.5.9 ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻜﻞ: ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ‬ ◄ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﻛﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ...
Page 73 ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء: ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ‬ ◄ (2.5.9 ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ. ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ .‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ‬ .‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻙ‬ :‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ، ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬ .‫ﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻭ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻻﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ .‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ...
Page 74 ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ‬ (7.5.9 ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ 6.9 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ (SIM ‫)ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍ ً ﺇﻟﻰ‬ PIN ‫ﻃﻠﺐ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ (1.6.9 ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ .‫ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﻦ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬SIM ‫ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻠﺐ‬ (2‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻴﻦ )ﺍﻟﺨﻂ1 ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻂ‬ ‫...
Page 75 ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ‬ ◄ (2.6.9 ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ .‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻈﺮ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ، ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻴﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻏﻼﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ‬ ◄ .‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻈﺮ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ (3.6.9 ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬...
Page 76 ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ :‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬ (5.6.9 ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫- ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻫﻮﺍﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ، ﺗﺘﻢ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ .‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ .PIN2 ‫- ﺇﻟﻐﺎء‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ◄ .‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬ ‫- ﻋﺮﺽ...
Page 77 ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬ (6.6.9 ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ 7.9 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻫﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺧﺺ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻟﺪﻯ‬ PIN1 ‫ﺑﻪ. ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ: ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺟﺪﻙ...
Page 78 ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ 8.9 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ”ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ“، ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ .‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ 9.9 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺒﺪء ﻛﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ، ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ‬ .‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ 0.9 ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ...
Page 79 ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬ ‫ﻛﻮﻧﻚ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍ ً ﻋﻦ‬ .‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺫﻥ - ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬ .‫ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‬LG ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ً ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬ ◄ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺑﻄﺎﻝ ﺻﻼﺣﻴﺔ‬ ◄ .‫ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‬ :‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‬...
Page 80 ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬ KG290 : ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ GSM 900 / DCS 1800 / PCS 1900 : ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎ ﻡ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‬ C+55°CC: ‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ‬ C-10°CC: ‫ﺃﺩﻧﻰ‬...
Page 83 KG290 ‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻯ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬ ‫- ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬...
Page 84 ‫ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﭽﻪ‬ T9 ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ABC ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻯ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ 123 ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ KG290 ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺟﺰﺍء ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺳﺒﮏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ‬ 32 ‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﻮﮐﯽ ﻫﺎ‬...
Page 85 ‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﯼ‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻮﺯﻳﮏ‬ ‫ﺯﻧﮓ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎﯼ ﺑﯽ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭﯼ‬ ‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎﯼ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ FM ‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎﯼ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺕ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺳﻨﺞ‬ ‫ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ...
Page 86 ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﯼ‬ ‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‬ ‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﯼ‬ ‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﯼ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻮﻳﺴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻭﻩ...
Page 87 ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺮﻭﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﻳﻴﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺮژﯼ‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ USB ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺷﮑﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺷﮑﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ‬ ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ...
Page 88 ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ‬ ‫ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎ‬KG290 ‫ﻣﺘﺸﻜﺮﻳﻢ، ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﯼ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﻦ ﺁﻭﺭﯼ‬ .‫ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺑﭙﺮﺩﺍﺯﺩ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻬﻤﯽ ﺩﺭ‬...
Page 89 ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ‬ ‫• ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﯽ ﺍﻣﻦ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ. ﻋﺪﻡ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫ﻛﻮﺩﻛﺎﻥ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ. ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎﻙ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﯽ‬ ‫ﻛﻮﭼﻜﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
Page 90 ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ‬ !‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ‬ ‫• ﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻛﻪ ﻃﺒﻖ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﺳﺖ، ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ، ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﻤﺎﺭﺳﺘﺎﻥ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮ‬ .‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﭘﺰﺷﻜﯽ ﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫•...
Page 91 ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻧﺪﻫﺎﯼ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻣﻮﺍﺝ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ‬ .‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﯼ‬KG290 ‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺪﻝ‬ ‫ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﻤﻴﺴﻴﻮﻥ‬SAR ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﯼ‬ ◄ ‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻠﯽ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺗﺸﻌﺸﻌﺎﺕ‬...
Page 92 ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺖ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯼ‬ .‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﻴﺎﻧﺪﺍﺯﻳﺪ‬ ◄ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻭﻳﻨﻴﻠﯽ‬ ◄ !‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﻭﻛﺶ ﺁﻥ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ‬ .‫ﺑﺒﻴﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﻃﺮﯼ، ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﻭ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ...
Page 93 ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ‬ ◄ ◄ ‫ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ. ﺍﮔﺮ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻮﺳﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ .‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‬ .‫ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﺪ، ﺳﻮﺯﺵ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﯽ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻫﺪﻓﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ‬ ◄...
Page 94 ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻜﯽ‬ ‫ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﮔﻮﺷﻴﻬﺎﯼ ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻻﺗﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺍﯼ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍﻧﻨﺪﮔﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ‬ .‫ﻣﯽ...
Page 95 ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺗﺎﻗﻚ ﺧﻮﺩﺭﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻭ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺒﻴﻞ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻴﺴﻪ ﻫﻮﺍ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ◄ ◄ ‫ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ، ﮔﺎﺯﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺸﺘﻌﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﻴﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻳﺎ‬ .‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﯽ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪﻩ،...
Page 96 ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻃﺮﯼ ﻭ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺖ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺑﺎﻃﺮﯼ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﺭ‬ ◄ ‫ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ‬ ‫ﻻﺯﻡ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژ، ﺑﺎﻃﺮﯼ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬ .‫ﻣﺜﻞ ﺣﻤﺎﻡ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‬ ◄ ‫ﮐﺎﻣﻞ...
Page 97 ‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻥ‬ ‫ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻨﻮﺍﻳﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺩﺭ‬ ◄ ‫ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﺪﺍﯼ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﺷﻨﻮﺍﻳﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﻣﯽ ﺑﻴﻨﺪ. ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ. ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ...
Page 98 KG290 ‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﺟﺰﺍء ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﯼ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻯ ﭘﺸﺖ‬ ‫ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﯼ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬ :‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ‬ ◄ ‫ﻟﻨﺰﻫﺎﻯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬ :‫ﺩﺭ ﻃﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ◄ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍﯼ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻃﺮﯼ‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻛﺖ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ‬...
Page 99 ‫ﺍﺟﺰﺍء ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﺮﻳﺴﺘﺎﻝ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫( ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬LCD) ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﻭ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﮔﻮﻳﯽ‬ ◄ ،‫ﺑﺎﻻ: ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ‬ ◄ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﯼ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ‬ :‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ‬ ◄ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎﯼ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺧﻴﺮﺍ ً ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ: ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ...
Page 100 KG290 ‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻯ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬ .‫ﺑﺎ ﻫﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻳﻚ ﮐﺎﺭﺍﮐﺘﺮ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‬ ◄ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻯ، ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ. ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ .‫ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‬ :‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ‬...
Page 101 ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ .‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎﻯ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻯ ﺭﻭﻯ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜﯽ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻯ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﺕ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ .‫ﻣﻰ...
Page 102 KG290 ‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻯ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻯ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻯ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻨﻰ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ‬ .‫ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺭ‬ .‫ﻳﻚ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺷﺪ‬ WAP ‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﻰ ﺑﻪ‬ .‫ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ‬...
Page 103 ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﯼ‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ .‫1. ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺁﻥ ﺟﺎﻯ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ، ﻭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ .‫ﻃﻼﻳﻰ...
Page 104 ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ .‫2. ﺑﺎﺗﺮﯼ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﯼ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﯼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻟﺒﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻳﯽ‬ ‫ﺟﺎﯼ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﯼ ﻓﺮﻭ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﻯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻛﺎﻣﻼ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻯ ﺧﻮﺩ‬ .‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ...
Page 105 .‫3. ﺑﺎﺗﺮﯼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﮔﻴﺮﻩ ﺁﺯﺍﺩﺳﺎﺯﻯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻯ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ‬ .‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻯ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺏ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﯼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬ .‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﯼ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﯼ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬...
Page 106 ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﯼ‬ ‫2. ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﯼ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺳﻔﺮﯼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ‬ .‫ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ، ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ‬ ‫3. ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﯼ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﻤﺎﻡ‬ .‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﯼ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ .‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫4.
Page 107 ‫ﺟﺪﺍ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ‬ !‫ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺭﻋﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻭ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺑﺮﻕ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕﯽ ﻭ ﺁﺗﺶ‬ ،‫ﺍﺳﺖ، ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺳﻴﺎﺭ‬ .‫ﺳﻮﺯﯼ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ .‫ﺁﻥ...
Page 108 ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎﯼ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭﯼ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ .‫1. ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫1. ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎﯼ‬ ‫2. ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩﯼ، ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ...
Page 109 ‫2. ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ، ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ‬ .‫ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻃﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻴﺪ ﺻﺪﺍﯼ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ، ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﯼ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ، ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ...
Page 110 ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎﯼ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ‬ ABC ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺍﻟﻔﺒﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ. ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺣﻚ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ...
Page 111 ، ‫ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‬T9 ‫1. ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ‬ ‫1. ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ. ﺑﺮﺍﯼ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻬﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ .‫ﻫﺮ...
Page 112 ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎﯼ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ‬ ‫2. ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ، ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬ ، ‫2. ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻫﺮ ﺣﺮﻓﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ‬ .‫ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﻜﺒﺎﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﭘﺎﮎ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫3.
Page 113 123 (‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ )ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ 321 ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺴﺎﺯﺩ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ )ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬ .(‫ﻳﻚ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ، ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ‬ .‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ...
Page 114 ‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ :‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ◄ ‫3. ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎ‬ ‫2. ﺛﺒﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ‬ ‫1. ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﮔﺮ‬ ‫3.1 ﺯﻧﮓ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫2.1 ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ‬ ‫1.1 ﺻﻔﺤﻪ...
Page 115 ‫8. ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫6. ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﯼ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ‬ ‫4. ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﯼ‬ ‫6.1 ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬ ‫8.1 ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ‬ ‫4.1 ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻮﺯﻳﮏ‬ ‫8.2 ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫6.2 ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎ‬ ‫4.2 ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫8.3 ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫6.3 ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫4.3 ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭﯼ‬ ‫8.4 ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ‬ ‫6.4 ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ‬ FM ‫4.4 ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬...
Page 116 ‫ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﮔﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ‬ 1.1 ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫]ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ[ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫1. ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ .‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ. ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺳﺎﻳﺘﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ.
Page 117 ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ‬ 6.1 ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ 3.1 ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ،‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ، ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‬ URL ‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ. ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﻛﻮﻛﯽ ﻭ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺖ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺘﯽ ﺭﺍ‬ .‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ .‫ﺧﺎﺹ،...
Page 118 ‫ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﮔﺮ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻠﯽ: ﻫﻤﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ◄ (6.6.1 ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ‬ .‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻳﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ‬ .‫ﺣﻴﻦ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺳﺎﺯﺩ‬ ‫ﺳﺒﮏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ (2.6.1 ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ...
Page 119 ‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ‬ .‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻔﺮﺳﺘﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻪ ﺧﻂ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ◄ ‫( ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ‬CLI) ‫ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ‬ .‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ ◄ ‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺳﻮﺍﺑﻖ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎﯼ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬ .‫ﺷﺪﻩ، ﻧﺎﻣﻮﻓﻖ، ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﻛﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎﯼ...
Page 120 ‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ‬ .‫ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎﯼ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ: ﻣﺪﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎﯼ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﯼ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﯼ ﺍﺧﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ‬ ◄ :‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎﯼ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ: ﻣﺪﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎﯼ‬ ◄ .‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ ◄ ‫ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ...
Page 121 ‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫ﺯﻧﮓ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ 2.3 ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ 1.3 ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ، ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺯﻧﮕﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭﯼ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﻣﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﯼ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ‬ .‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﻫﺮﮔﺎﻩ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﯼ‬ ‫1.
Page 122 ‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ: ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‬ ‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ، ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ ◄ ‫]ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎﯼ ﺯﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻭ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﯼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺭﻭﺯ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ. ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ؛‬ ‫ﺗﺎ 02 ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ: ﻫﻤﻪ...
Page 123 ‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‬ 4.3 ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ 3.3 ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ [‫]ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ‬ ‫1. ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﯼ ٤ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ .‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ .‫ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ: ﺟﻤﻊ، ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻖ، ﺿﺮﺏ، ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ‬ ‫2. ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ، ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ .‫1. ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ .‫]ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ[ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ...
Page 124 ‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫2. ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺘﯽ ﻫﻨﻮﺯ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ، ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬ 7.3 ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ .‫]ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫3. ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻭ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ‬ :‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻫﺎ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﭼﭗ...
Page 125 ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺟﻬﺎﻧﯽ‬ 0.3 ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ 8.3 ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎﯼ ﺷﻬﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﻋﻤﺪﻩ ﺟﻬﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ. )ﻣﻴﻼﺩﯼ، ﻫﺠﺮﯼ‬ .‫ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‬ .(‫ﻳﺎ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬ ‫1. ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺷﻬﺮﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ...
Page 126 ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺒﻮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﯼ‬ 1.4 ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬MP3 ‫ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ‬MP3 ‫ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺨﺶ‬KG290 ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ. ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ. ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻫﺪﺳﺖ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ‬...
Page 127 ‫ﺻﺪﺍﯼ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ: ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺻﺪﺍﯼ ﺩﻳﺎﻓﺮﺍﮔﻢ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ◄ 2.4 ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ .‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻋﻜﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫• ﺟﻬﺖ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻳﺰ: ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ‬ ◄ ‫1. ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ،(1280X960) ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻛﺖ...
Page 128 ‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﯼ‬ :‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ: 4 ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭﯼ‬ ◄ 3.4 ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ .‫ﺭﻧﮕﯽ، ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﻗﻬﻮﻩ ﺍﯼ، ﻣﻮﻧﻮ، ﻧﮕﺎﺗﻴﻮ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ: ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ◄ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺏ ﻭ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻮﺏ‬ .‫ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺳﺎﺯﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ...
Page 129 FM ‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ‬ 5.4 ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ 4.4 ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ 10 ‫ﺑﺎ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ 06 ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬ .‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﻜﺸﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫]ﺿﺒﻂ[، ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ، ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ.
Page 130 ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ 1.5 ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ .‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ: ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬ ◄ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ‬ .‫1. ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ،(‫ )ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ‬SMS ‫ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﺎ‬ ،(‫ )ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﯼ‬MMS ‫2.
Page 131 ‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ: ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ، ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫- ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ: ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ‬ ◄ .‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ، ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ‬ .‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ .‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬ ‫- ﺻﺪﺍ: ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﯼ‬ ‫5.
Page 132 ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ: ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﯼ‬ ‫3. ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻳﻜﯽ ﺍﺯ‬ ◄ ‫ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻫﺎﯼ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﯼ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻼ ً ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ‬ .‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ .‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ: ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪﻫﺎﯼ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ‬ ◄...
Page 133 ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ: ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﯼ‬ ◄ 2.5 ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ .‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ .‫ﺣﺬﻑ: ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ◄ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﯼ‬ .‫ﭘﺎﺳﺦ: ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﻨﺪﻩ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬ .‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ...
Page 134 ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻮﻳﺴﻬﺎ‬ 4.5 ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ 3.5 ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﭘﻨﺞ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﭼﻨﺪﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﯼ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻏﺎﻟﺒﺎ ً ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﺿﺮ ﻣﯽ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ .‫ﺁﻧﻬﺎ...
Page 135 ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ 7.5 ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ 5.5 ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ (‫) ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻭ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻼ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ. ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬ .‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍﯼ...
Page 136 ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﮕﻮ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ‬ (1.7.5 ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ‬ 8.5 ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫1. ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻦ‬ ،‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‬ (1.8.5 ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ. ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫6 ﺍﻟﮕﻮﯼ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﺎ‬...
Page 137 T9 ‫: ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﯼ‬T9 ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎﯼ‬ ،‫ﺩﺭﺝ: ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ، ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ◄ ◄ T9” ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ، ﺻﺪﺍ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﯼ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ‬ T9 ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ“ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﯼ‬ .‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ .‫ﺭﺍ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺶ...
Page 138 ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ: ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ: ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ◄ ◄ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﯼ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﯼ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﺘﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﻓﻘﻴﺖ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬ .‫ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ .‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ: ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻠﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫: ﺍﮔﺮ...
Page 139 ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ◄ (5.9.5 ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ‬ . ‫ﺷﺨﺼﯽ: ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎﯼ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ‬ ◄ .‫ﺗﺒﻠﻴﻐﺎﺕ: ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎﯼ ﺑﺎﺯﺭﮔﺎﻧﯽ‬ ‫- ﻓﻌﺎﻝ: ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ، ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺗﺎﻥ‬ .‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ: ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﯼ‬ .‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‬ ‫- ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ: ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺕ...
Page 140 ‫ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﯼ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ‬ .‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﻤﻪ: ﺣﺬﻑ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﯼ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬ ◄ 1.6 ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ: ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ◄ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺯﻳﺮ، ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ .‫ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‬ ‫]ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ[ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ، ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ :‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ: ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ◄...
Page 141 :‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ: ﺻﺪﺍﯼ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮﯼ‬ ◄ ◄ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺿﻤﻴﻤﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬ .‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ .‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ: ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ...
Page 142 ‫ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﯼ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬ (2.5.6 ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ‬ 4.6 ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻫﺮﻧﻮﻉ ﭘﺮﻭﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﯼ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬ .‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ. ﺍﺯ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺻﻞ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﭘﺮﻭﻧﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺟﺎﻭﺍ...
Page 143 !‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫• ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ‬ ‫ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬JAR ‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬ ◄ J2ME (Java 2 Micro Edition) ‫ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻔﯽ‬JAD ‫ﺟﺎﻭﺍ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ. ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﮐﻠﻴﻪ ﺭﻳﺰ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ. ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺮ...
Page 144 ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎ، ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎ، ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﻳﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ، ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﺳﺎﺯﯼ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. ﺷﺶ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬ ،‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ: ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ، ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ، ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﺮﺯﺍﻧﻨﺪﻩ‬ .‫ﺻﺪﺍﯼ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ، ﻫﺪﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ...
Page 145 ‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ: ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ‬ ◄ 1.8 ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫1. ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬ .‫]ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ[ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ .‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ...
Page 146 ‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫1. ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬ 3.8 ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ .‫]ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ[ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻫﺮ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﯼ‬ ‫2. ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍﯼ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻴﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﯽ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺟﻬﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺎ‬...
Page 147 ‫ﮐﭙﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ‬ 5.8 ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ 4.8 ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ: ﺍﻋﻀﺎﯼ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﻢ‬ ◄ .‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ، ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﻭﯼ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﻭﯼ ﺳﻴﻢ‬ .‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ...
Page 148 ‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻛﭙﯽ/ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻫﻤﻪ‬ ◄ 7.8 ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﭙﯽ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ. ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ‬ (1.7.8 ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ‬ .‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻧﭙﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫1. ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫1. ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ...
Page 149 ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ◄ 8.8 ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﯼ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻭ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ: ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ‬ ◄ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ.ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻛﺪ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺧﺎﺻﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻪ‬ .‫ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﭘﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ )ﺍﮔﺮ‬ (‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ...
Page 150 ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﮑﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬ (4.1.9 ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ‬ 1.9 ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﻦ 42 ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻭ 21 ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ .‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ (1.1.9 ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ‬ .‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ‬ 2.9 ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﺷﮑﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ (2.1.9 ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ...
Page 151 ‫ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺒﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‬ (4.3.9 ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ‬ (1.3.9 ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ )ﺭﻭﺷﻦ(، ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎﯼ 4 ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬On ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ‬ .‫ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﺍﺭ ﻭ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮﯼ ﺩﺭ‬ .‫ﻭﺳﻂ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯ‬...
Page 152 ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬ (8.3.9 ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ‬ 4.9 ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﮐﻨﻮﻧﯽ ﻣﻨﻮﯼ ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺸﻮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ. ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ‬ (1.4.9 ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ‬ .‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭﯼ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ‬ ‫ﺭﻧﮓ...
Page 153 ‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ‬ (1.2.4.9 ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ‬ .‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻟﻴﺴﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ، ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻫﺎﯼ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ، ﺳﻌﯽ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ...
Page 154 ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ‬ (4.2.4.9 ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ‬ 5.9 ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ‬ .‫ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺳﺎﺯﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ (1.5.9 ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ‬ USB ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ (3.4.9 ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎﯼ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ، ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎﯼ ﻓﮑﺲ ﻭ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫...
Page 155 ‫ﻟﻐﻮ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ: ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ‬ ◄ (2.5.9 ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ‬ .‫ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻐﻮ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ: ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ◄ ‫ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎﯼ ﻓﺮﻋﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﻫﺮ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﯼ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬ .‫]ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ[، ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺮ...
Page 156 ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ: ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ◄ (4.5.9 ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﺑﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﮕﺮﺩﺩ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﯼ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍ ً ﺁﻏﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ: ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ◄ .‫ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ‬ .‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ...
Page 157 ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ‬ ‫ ﻛﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ 01 ﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬PUK .5 6.9 ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ 01 ﺑﺎﺭ ﭘﻴﻦ ﮐﺪ ﻏﻠﻂ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﻠﻔﻨﺘﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﺪ ﭘﻴﻦ‬ (1.6.9 ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ‬ .‫ﺑﺎ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ...
Page 158 ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﻟﻐﻮ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺘﻬﺎﯼ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ◄ (4.6.9 ‫)ﻣﻨﻮ‬ .‫ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻋﻴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻟﻐﻮ ﮐﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﯽ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎﯼ ﺗﻠﻔﻨﯽ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ. ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ◄ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻋﻴﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎﯼ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ‬ .‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ...
Page 159 ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺮﻭﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬ ◄ 7.9 ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎﯼ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺮﻭﺍﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ .‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭﯼ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ◄ ‫. ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭﯼ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ...
Page 160 ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ‬ 9.9 ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻛﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ. ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺪ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ‬ .‫ﻧﻴﺎﺯﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ 0.9 ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬ ،‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻫﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ، ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ...
Page 161 ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺷﻤﺎ‬ .‫ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺳﺎﺯﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﯽ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ-ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﺪﺯﻓﺮﯼ ﻭ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ .‫ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‬LG ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ‬ ◄ ‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﮔﺎﺭﺍﻧﺘﯽ‬ ◄ ‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ: ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺳﺎﻗﻂ‬...
Page 162 ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﯽ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ‬ KG290 : ‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬ GSM 900 / DCS 1800 / PCS 1900 : ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬ C+55°CC: ‫ﺣﺪ ﺍﮐﺜﺮ‬ C-10°CC: ‫ﺣﺪ ﺍﻗﻞ‬...
Page 165 KG290 User Guide - English This document is the user guide for the LG KG290 Mobile Phone. All rights for this document are reserved by LG Electronics. Copying, modifying and distributing this document without the consent of LG Electronics are prohibited.
Page 166: Table Of Contents
Guidelines for Safe Changing and Efficient Use 8 Saved pages the text input mode Settings Using the T9 Mode KG290 Features 15 Network profiles Using the ABC Mode 28 View style Using the 123 mode Parts of the phone Cache...
Page 167 Call history Tools Multimedia All calls Alarm clock MP3 player All songs Missed calls Calendar My playlist Dialled calls Calculator Settings Received calls Memo Camera Call duration To do Video camera Call costs Stopwatch FM radio Data information Unit converter Voice recorder World time SIM services...
Page 168 Table of Contents Messaging Settings Profiles Text message New message Multimedia message 55 Text Contacts Voicemail number Multimedia Search Push message Inbox New contact Info message Drafts Speed dials Outbox Groups My stuff Sent Copy all Images Listen voicemail Delete all Sounds Info messages Settings...
Page 169 Settings Connectivity Flight mode Bluetooth Power save Date & Time Network Reset Set date USB connection mode 72 Date format Memory status Call Set time Call divert Time format Accessories Answer mode Send my number Languages Technical data Call waiting Display Minute minder Wallpaper...
Page 170: Introduction
Introduction Congratulations on your purchase of the advanced and compact KG290 mobile phone, designed to operate with the latest digital mobile communication technology. This user’s guide contains important information on the use and operation of this phone. Please read all the information carefully for...
Page 171: For Your Safety
For Your Safety Please read these simple guidelines. • Not to charge a handset near flammable material as the handset Not following these guidelines may can get hot and smoulder the Material, be dangerous or illegal. Further hence possible house fire. detailed information is given in this manual.
Page 172: Guidelines For Safe And Efficient Use
Guidelines for Safe and Efficient Use Please read these simple guidelines. general population. The guidelines were Not following these guidelines may developed by independent scientific be dangerous or illegal. Further organizations through periodic and detailed information is given in this thorough evaluation of scientific studies.
Page 173 device while operating can be well ear or when positioned at least below the maximum value. This is 1.5 cm away from the body. because the device is designed to When a carry case, belt clip or operate at multiple power levels so as holder is used for body-worn to use only the power required to operation, it should not contain...
Page 174 Guidelines for Safe and Efficient Use * The SAR limit for mobile devices Product care and used by the public is 2.0 maintenance watts/kilogram (W/kg) averaged WARNING! over ten grams of body tissue. Only use batteries, chargers and The guidelines incorporate a accessories approved for use with this substantial margin of safety to give particular phone model.
Page 175 Do not drop. Do not expose the phone to liquid or moisture. Do not subject this unit to mechanical vibration or shock. Use accessories, such as earphones and headsets, with The coating of the phone may be caution. Ensure that cables are damaged if covered with wrap or tucked away safely and do not vinyl wrapper.
Page 176 Guidelines for Safe and Efficient Use Some hearing aids might be RF energy may affect some disturbed by mobile phones. electronic systems in your motor vehicle such as a car stereo or Minor interference may affect TVs, safety equipment. radios, PCs, etc. If your vehicle is equipped with an air bag, do not obstruct it with Road safety...
Page 177 Potentially explosive Children atmospheres Keep the phone in a safe place out of small children's reach. It includes Do not use the phone at a small parts which if detached may refueling point. Don't use near fuel cause a choking hazard. or chemicals.
Page 178 Do not expose the battery charger Use only LG batteries and to direct sunlight or use it in high chargers. LG chargers are humidity, such as the bathroom. designed to maximize the battery Do not leave the battery in hot or life.
Page 179: Kg290 Features
KG290 Features Parts of the phone Rear view Left side view Holes for a carrying strap Side keys In standby mode: Camera lens Keypad volume adjustment. During a call: Earpiece volume adjustment. Camera hot key SIM card External Battery socket...
Page 180 KG290 Features Open view Earpiece Main screen Navigation keys Top: Icons showing In standby mode: signal strength, battery Briefly: Write new level and various other Message (Hold down: present functions Messages pop-up) Bottom: Soft key Briefly: List of Contacts indications...
Page 181 Display Information The screen displays several icons. These are described below. Icon area On-Screen Icons Text and Icon/Indicator Description graphic area Tells you the strength of the network signal. Right key Menu Contacts indicators You can use GPRS service. Area Description The alarm has been set First line...
Page 182 KG290 Features Icon/Indicator Description Note The quality of the conversation may You have received a change depending on network voice message. coverage. When the signal strength Vibrate only menu in is below 2 bars, you may experience muting, call drop and poor audio.
Page 183: Getting Started
Getting Started Installing the SIM card card, press down lightly and pull it in the reverse direction. and battery 1. Installing the SIM card. Your SIM card contains your phone number, service details and contacts and must be inserted into your handset.
Page 184 Getting Started Note The metal contact of the SIM card can easily be damaged by scratches. Pay special attention to the SIM card while handling. Follow the instructions supplied with the SIM card. 2. Installing the battery. Insert the battery aligning the gold contacts on the battery with the battery terminals (gold contacts) in the battery compartment.
Page 185 3. To remove the battery. Turn the power off. (If the power is left on, there is a chance you could lose the stored telephone numbers and messages.) Press the battery release latches ‚ and open the battery —. Then remove the battery.
Page 186: The Battery
Getting Started Charging the Battery 2. Connect the other end of the travel adapter to the main socket. Before connecting the travel adapter 3. The moving bars on the battery to the phone you must first install icon will stop after charging is the battery.
Page 187: Disconnecting The Charger
Disconnecting the WARNING! • Unplug the power cord and charger charger during lightning storms to avoid electric shock or fire. Disconnect the travel adapter from the phone as shown in the diagram • Make sure that no sharp-edged items such as animal teeth or nails, come below.
Page 188: General Functions
General Functions Making and answering 1. Press to access the contacts list. calls 2. Scroll to the contact to which you wish to make a call. Making a voice call 3. Press to make a voice call. 1. Enter the number including the full area code, or select the phone 4.
Page 189 In idle mode with the phone open, Note you can adjust the key volume To reject an incoming call, press using . or the right soft key twice. If you set Answer mode as Slide Answering a call open (Menu 9.5.2), you can answer the call simply by opening the When you receive a call, the phone slide.
Page 190: Entering Text
General Functions Signal strength T9 mode You can check the strength of the This mode lets you enter words signal by the signal indicator ( with only one keystroke per on the left top of your phone screen. letter. Each key on the keypad Signal strength can vary, particularly has more than one letter.
Page 191: Changing The Text Input Mode
Using the T9 Mode 123 mode (Number mode) The T9 predictive text input mode Type numbers using one allows you to enter words easily keystroke per number. with a minimum number of key To change to 123 mode in a text presses.
Page 192: Using The Abc Mode
General Functions If the word is still incorrect after Using the ABC Mode typing completely, press once to enter your text. or more to scroll through the 1. Press the key labelled with the other word options. required letter: Example Once for the first letter.
Page 193: Using The 123 Mode
Using the 123 (Number) mode Characters in the order display Upper Case Lower Case The 123 mode enables you to enter . , / ? ! - : ' " @ 1 . , / ? ! - : ' " @ 1 numbers in a text message A B C 2 À...
Page 194: Overview Of Menu Functions
Overview of Menu Functions You can launch a menu by pressing in the idle screen. Move to the desired item and press to go into the sub menu. From the main menu you can also go into a submenu by directly pressing the corresponding numeric key as follows.
Page 195 4. Multimedia 6. My stuff 8. Contacts 4.1 MP3 player 6.1 Images 8.1 Search 8.2 New contact 4.2 Camera 6.2 Sounds 8.3 Speed dials 4.3 Video camera 6.3 Videos 8.4 Groups 4.4 FM radio 6.4 Others 8.5 Copy all 4.5 Voice recorder 6.5 Games &...
Page 196: Browser
Browser Home Connecting to a desired Menu 1.1 bookmark You can launch the web browser and Press or select Connect from the access the homepage of the web Options menu. service provided by your Service Provider. Adding a new folder 1.
Page 197: History
History View style (Menu 1.6.2) Menu 1.4 You can change the browser screen Shows the list of web pages titles size. (full screen or fit to screen) accessed recently. You can access the web page easily. Cache (Menu 1.6.3) Enabling Cache allows you to store Saved pages accessed pages to your phone.
Page 198: Security Certificates
Browser Security Certificates Java script (Menu 1.6.5) (Menu 1.6.7) If stored, a list of root/ca certificates This menu allows you to activate the required for WTLS/TLS can be found Java Script while you use the web here. Certificates can be viewed browser.
Page 199 Call history You can check the record of missed, Missed calls Menu 2.2 received, and dialled calls only if the Allows you to view missed call network supports Calling Line records, make a call, send a Identification (CLI) within the service message and save the number in area.
Page 200 Call history Call duration Call costs Menu 2.5 Menu 2.6 Allows you to view the duration of Allows you to check the cost of your your incoming and outgoing calls. last call, all calls, remaining and You can also reset the call times. reset the cost.
Page 201 Tools Alarm clock Menu 3.1 If you see marked date in the You can set the alarm clock to go on calendar, it means that there is a at a specified time. schedule or memo that day. This 1. Select On and enter the alarm function helps to remind you of your time you want.
Page 202 Tools 2. Use a navigation key to select a Note sign for calculation. If you want to change the text input mode, press the in order..3. Then input the numbers. 4. Press key to view the result. 5.
Page 203 Stopwatch 2. Select the unit you want to Menu 3.6 convert by pressing 1. Press [Start] to take time and It’s impossible to input “-” symbol record the lap time by pressing in unit converter. [Lap]. 3. Select the standard value by using 2.
Page 204 Tools SIM services Menu 3.9 This is a SIM service menu. It depends on SIM and the network services. Calendar settings Menu 3.0 In this menu, you can set a base time format for the calendar.(A.D or Hijriya or Farsi)
Page 205 Multimedia MP3 player Repeat (Menu 4.1.3.2) Menu 4.1 If you select One, only one song you selected will be repeated. And all All songs (Menu 4.1.1) the songs in your playlist will be You can view all the music files repeated if you select All.
Page 206 Multimedia Camera • To take a picture Menu 4.2 Hold down the camera button. Using the camera module built in - To take clear pictures, press the your phone, you can take pictures. camera button while holding the Additionally, you can camera without any movement.
Page 207 1. Hold down the in standby mode. Save to [ ]: You can set the space after taking a picture. 2. Focus on the subject to capture (External/Phone) the image, and then press [OK]. Multi shot [ ]: Allows to take 3.
Page 208 Multimedia Video camera FM radio Menu 4.3 Menu 4.4 1. Select Video camera menu. 2. Video camera settings menu is the Title Descriptions same with Photo camera settings, Shows the frequency except following items: Frequency indicating the current cursor. Volume Controlling the volume FM frequency and channel number...
Page 209 You can search radio stations and Voice recorder Menu 4.5 enjoy listening to the radio. In this feature you can record over 10 1. Press the corresponding number voice memos, up to a maximum of key of a channel to store the 60 seconds each.
Page 210: Messaging
Messaging New message Options Menu 5.1 Send to: Sends text messages. This menu includes functions related 1. Enter numbers of recipient. to SMS (Short Message Service), MMS (Multimedia Message 2. Press key to add more Service), voice mail, as well recipients.
Page 211: Multimedia
Clear text: You can clear text - Text templates: You can use Text while writing SMS. templates already set in the Exit: If you press Exit while phone. writing a message, you can end - Contacts: You can add phone the writing message and back to numbers present in the new Message menu.
Page 212 Messaging Maximum available file size, that Save: You can save multimedia can be inserted to MMS-message, messages To drafts or As is 300 kb. templates. Edit subject: Allows you to Options modify the multimedia message Send to: You can send multimedia you have chosen.
Page 213: Inbox
Inbox For notified multimedia message, Menu 5.2 you have to wait for downloading You will be alerted when you have and processing of the message. received messages. They will be To read a message, select one of the stored in Inbox. messages by pressing the left soft If the phone shows ‘No space for SIM message’, you have to delete...
Page 214: Drafts
Messaging Information: You can view Drafts Menu 5.3 information about received Using this menu, you can preset messages; Sender’s address, multimedia messages that you use Subject (only for Multimedia most frequently. This menu shows message), Message date & time, the preset multimedia message list. Message type, Message size.
Page 215: Outbox
Multi delete: Deletes selected Delete all: Deletes all of the drafts at one time. messages in the folder. Delete all: You can delete all Outbox the messages in the outbox. Menu 5.4 The Outbox is a temporary storage Sent place for messages waiting to be Menu 5.5 sent.
Page 216: Info Messages
Messaging Info messages Read (Menu 5.7.1) Menu 5.7 1. When you have received an info (Dependent to network and service message and select Read subscription) to view the message, it will be Info service messages are text displayed on the screen. You can messages delivered by the network read another message by scrolling to your handset.
Page 217: Templates
Active list: You can select info The following options are available. service message numbers in the View: Select this to view the active list. if you activate an info selected template. service number, you can receive Edit: Use this to edit the selected messages sent from the number.
Page 218: Multimedia
Messaging Multimedia Settings (Menu 5.8.2) Menu 5.9 After you have saved a new Text message (Menu 5.9.1) template, you can use the following Message types: options. Text, Voice, Fax, Natl. paging, View: You can see multimedia X.400, Email, ERMES templates. Usually, the type of message is set Edit: You can edit multimedia to Text.
Page 219: Multimedia Message
Reply charging: When a Validity period: This network service allows you to set how long message is sent, it allows the recipients to reply and charge the your text messages will be stored at the message centre. cost of the reply to your telephone bill.
Page 220: Voicemail Number
Messaging multimedia messages only when Voicemail number (Menu 5.9.3) you are registered to your home You can receive voicemail if your network (not roaming). network service provider supports Network profiles: If you select this feature. When a new voicemail the multimedia message server, is received, a symbol will be you can set the URL for the displayed on the screen.
Page 221: Info Message
Info message Languages (Menu 5.9.5) - You can select the language you Receive want by pressing - On: If you select this menu, your Then, the info service message phone will receive Info service will be shown in the language messages.
Page 222: My Stuff
My stuff Images New folder: You can create a Menu 6.1 new folder within the folder The Images folder consists of currently selected. embedded links for downloading Multi delete: Deletes the pictures through the Internet. selected image. Pictures taken using the camera are Delete all: Deletes all images.
Page 223: Videos
File > > Information/ File info: again to start playing. You can view the file information. The followings are available using the left soft key [Options] in the New folder: You can create a Video list. new folder within the folder currently selected.
Page 224 My stuff Multi delete: Deletes the When viewing video clips in the selected video file. Media Player, the following options are available: Delete all: Deletes all video files. File > > Information: You can You can view a video using the video check information on files being player.
Page 225: Others
Others Menu 6.4 Note When you format your SD Card, you Any type of file can be stored here. should set the file system as FAT This folder is mainly used for not FAT32. This system doesn't transporting files from one PC to provide FAT32 file format.
Page 226: Profiles
Profiles In Profiles, you can adjust and customise the phone tones for different events, environments, or caller groups. There are five preset profiles: General, Silent, Vibrate only, Outdoor and Headset. Each profile can be personalised (Except Vibrate only, Silent menu).
Page 227: Contacts
Contacts Search New message: After you have Menu 8.1 found the number you want, you 1. Select Search by press the left can send a message (Text/ soft key [OK]. Multimedia/Email) to the selected 2. Enter the name that you want to number.
Page 228: New Contact
Contacts New contact 5. You can set a ringtone and a photo Menu 8.2 for the entry by pressing left soft key You can add phonebook entry by [Options]. using this function. Phone memory capacity is 1000 entries. SIM card Speed dials memory capacity depends on the Menu 8.3...
Page 229: Groups
4. After assigning the number as Remove member: You can speed dial, you can change and remove the member from the delete the entry. You can also Group member list. But the name make a call or send a message to and the number will be remained this number.
Page 230: Delete All
Contacts Name only: Set the phonebook Phone to SIM: You can copy the list with displaying only name. entry from Phone memory to SIM With picture: Set the phonebook Card. list with the information of picture. Delete all Name and number: Set the phonebook Menu 8.6 list...
Page 231 My Business card This option allows you to create your own business card featuring Name and an mobile phone number. To create a new business card, press the left soft key [New] and enter the information into the fields. If you want to edit, delete or to send a business card, select left soft key [options].
Page 232 Settings Date & Time Menu 9.1 Time format You can set functions relating to the (Menu 9.1.4) date and time. You can set the time format between 24 hours and 12 hours. Set date (Menu 9.1.1) You can enter the current date. Languages Menu 9.2 Date format...
Page 233 Backlight timer Menu style (Menu 9.3.2) (Menu 9.3.6) You can set the light-up duration of You can select the desired menu the display. style (Grid view or List view). Brightness Standby text (Menu 9.3.3) (Menu 9.3.7) You can set the brightness of LCD: If you select On, you can edit the 100%, 80%, 60%, 40% text which is displayed in standby...
Page 234 Settings Connectivity Menu 9.4 Bluetooth Network (Menu 9.4.1) (Menu 9.4.2) You can select a network which will Bluetooth connection be registered either automatically or Your phone has built-in Bluetooth manually. wireless technology which makes it possible for you to connect your Network selection (Menu 9.4.2.1) phone wirelessly to other Bluetooth...
Page 235 Automatic: If you select Preferred: You can set a list of Automatic mode, the phone will preferred networks and the phone automatically search for and select attempts to register with first, a network for you. Once you have before attempting to register to selected “Automatic”, the phone any other networks.
Page 236 Settings GPRS attach 1. Click on the notification area. (Menu 9.4.2.3) [Unplug or Eject Hardware] You can set GPRS service depending on various situations. 2. Select USB Mass Storage Device, click on Stop. Access point (Menu 9.4.2.4) The following message will Allow you to select the access point appear: “The ‘USB Mass Storage from the list.
Page 237 Call divert (Menu 9.5.1) Cancel all: Cancels all call divert The Call divert service allows you to service. divert incoming voice calls, fax calls, The submenus and data calls to another number. For details, contact your service provider. Call divert menus have the submenus shown below.
Page 238 Settings Answer mode On: You can send your phone (Menu 9.5.2) number to another party. Your Slide open: If you select this phone number will be shown on menu, you can receive an the receiver’s phone. incoming call when you open the Off: Your phone number will not slide.
Page 239 Send DTMF tones Minute minder (Menu 9.5.5) (Menu 9.5.8) If you select On, you can check the You can send touch tones during an call duration by a beep sound given active call to control your voice every minute during a call. mailbox or other automated phone services.
Page 240 Settings 3. If you want to change the setting, Phone lock (Menu 9.6.3) you need to enter PIN code when You can use a security code to avoid you switch on the phone. unauthorized use of the phone. 4. If you enter the wrong PIN code Whenever you switch on the phone, more than 3 times, the phone will the phone will request security code...
Page 241 All outgoing Cancel all barrings The barring service for all You can cancel all barring outgoing calls. services. Outgoing international Change password The barring service for all You can change the password for outgoing international calls. Call Barring Service. O/G international except home The submenus: country - Activate...
Page 242 Settings Fixed dial number Change codes (Menu 9.6.5) (Menu 9.6.6) (SIM dependent) PIN is an abbreviation of Personal You can restrict your outgoing calls Identification Number to prevent use to selected phone numbers. The by unauthorized person. numbers are protected by your PIN2 You can change the access codes: code.
Page 243 Flight mode Power save Menu 9.7 Menu 9.8 This allows you to use only the If you set On, you can save the phone’s features that do not require power when you don’t use the the use of the wireless network phone.
Page 244 Portable Handsfree Note Always use genuine LG accessories. This connects to your phone, Failure to do this may invalidate your allowing warranty. handsfree Accessories may be different in operation.
Page 245 Technical data General Product name : KG290 System : GSM 900 / DCS 1800 / PCS 1900 Ambient Temperatures Max : +55°C Min : -10°C...

LG KG290 User Manual

Introduction

For Your Safety

Guidelines for Safe and Efficient Use

KG290 Features

Getting Started

General Functions

Overview of Menu Functions

Browser

Quick Links

Related Manuals for LG KG290

Summary of Contents for LG KG290

Table of Contents